البروجكتر التفاعلي

‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪101 Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 10‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Windows 8.1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،Windows Vista‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Microsoft Office 2007‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ Word‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Excel‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪.PowerPoint‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Microsoft Office‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‪a‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows 10‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows 8‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ < ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Windows Vista‬ﺣﺪﺩ <‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ < ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ < ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ < ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ )‪ ,(EB-695Wi/EB-680Wi‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ ،Microsoft Office‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Microsoft Excel‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪ PowerPoint‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ < ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪.Windows‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪102‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ،[Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻂﺃ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ\" ﺻـ‪102‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪103‬‬ ‫• \"ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ\" ﺻـ‪107‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ‪a‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪103‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪b.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺒﱢﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪:‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻛﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪d‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪104‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬٍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻦﺮﺍﻟﺽﻘﺮﺃﺛﻨﺎﺹﺀﺍﻟﺍﻟﻤﻌﻀﺮﻐﻮﺽﻁﻣﻦ‪sy‬ﺟ‪a‬ﻬﺎﺯ‪E‬ﻱ‪r‬ﻋ‪o‬ﺮ‪e f‬ﺽ‪r‬ﻣ‪a‬ﺮ ﱠﻛﺒ‪w‬ﻴ‪ft‬ﻦ‪o‬ﺟﻨ‪S‬ﺒًﺎ‪r‬ﺇﻟ‪to‬ﻰ‪c‬ﺟ‪e‬ﻨ‪oj‬ﺐ‪ r.‬ﺛ‪P‬ﱢﺒﺖ‪EEpassyon‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪Interactive Driver Ver. 4.0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪b.‬‬ ‫‪.Interactive Function‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪a.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ\" ﺻـ‪104‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ\" ﺻـ‪123‬‬ ‫• \"ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ \"Easy Interactive Driver‬ﺻـ‪230‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ\" ﺻـ‪33‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Home‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪a‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪105‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻤﻔﺮﺩﻩ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻤﻔﺮﺩﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ\" ﺻـ‪107‬‬ ‫• \"ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ \"PC Free‬ﺻـ‪110‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ\" ﺻـ‪115‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ\" ﺻـ‪116‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ\" ﺻـ‪117‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ\" ﺻـ‪118‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ\" ﺻـ‪119‬‬ ‫• \"ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ\" ﺻـ‪120‬‬ ‫• \"ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ\" ﺻـ‪122‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ\" ﺻـ‪123‬‬ ‫• \"ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI3‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ\" ﺻـ‪131‬‬ ‫• \"ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪133‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪107‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Split‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ split screen‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ split screen‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Split Screen‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪b.[Menu‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ split screen‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻜﻼ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ELPCB02‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ < ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ELPCB02‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪108‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Enter‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪c،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪a.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Enter‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫]‪ .[Enter‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪f.[Menu‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Enter‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Enter‬ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪g.[Menu‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ ،split screen‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Split‬ﺃﻭ ]‪h.[Esc‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ‪ \"Split Screen‬ﺻـ‪108‬‬ ‫• \"ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ \"Split Screen‬ﺻـ‪109‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ\" ﺻـ‪102‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ‪Split Screen‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.split screen‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪2‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪/1‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ‪ USB Display‬ﻭ‪USB/LAN‬‬ ‫• ‪ USB‬ﻭ‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Enter‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ‪e‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[Enter‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Menu‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪109‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪Split Screen‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ‪E-Zoom‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [User‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺧﻂﺃ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻋﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﻭ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻧﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪,‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗُﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ُﺗﻄ َﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺧﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ < ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬ ‫{ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‬ ‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\" ﺻـ‪63‬‬ ‫• \"ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ\" ﺻـ‪65‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ\"\" ﺻـ‪164‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ\"\" ﺻـ‪165‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"\" ﺻـ‪167‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ\" ﺻـ‪117‬‬ ‫• \"ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ\" ﺻـ‪65‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪110 PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ PC Free‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﺤﻖ(‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺳﻬﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻴﺲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪jpg.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪CMYK‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪bmp.‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ \"PC Free‬ﺻـ‪110‬‬ ‫‪gif.‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ \"PC Free‬ﺻـ‪110‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪8192 × 8192‬‬ ‫‪png.‬‬ ‫• \"ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ \"PC Free‬ﺻـ‪111‬‬ ‫‪) avi.‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• \"ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ \"PC Free‬ﺻـ‪112‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻴﺲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪800 × 1280‬‬ ‫• \"ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ \"PC Free‬ﺻـ‪113‬‬ ‫‪(JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻴﺲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪800 × 1280‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪PC Free‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ PC Free‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻴﺲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪* 800 × 1280‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ AVI 1.0‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻴﺲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺑﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ PCM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ADPCM‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪720 × 1280‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪PC Free‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.FAT16/32‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ‪.PC Free‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﺑﺪ ًﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ‪.PC Free‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭ ًﻳﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪111‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.PC Free‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ،PC Free‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪.PC Free‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫• ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫• ‪E-Zoom‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ\" ﺻـ‪116‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ\" ﺻـ‪115‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ\" ﺻـ‪117‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ\" ﺻـ‪119‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪PC Free‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ PC Free‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪b:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪EB-‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪.(695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Enter‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ]‪ [Page‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪c:‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) .[Enter‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪112 PC Free‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• \"ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ \"PC Free‬ﺻـ‪113‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ \"USB‬ﺻـ‪31‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺭﻣﻮﺯًﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪d:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ PC Free‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ )‪EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪a.[Enter‬‬ ‫‪ (680Wi/EB-675Wi‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ )‪.(EB-695Wi/EB-680Wi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.PC Free‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ )‪EB-695Wi/EB-‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ (685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ )‪.(EB-695Wi/EB-680Wi‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪e.[Esc‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪f.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪113 PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪PC Free‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪b:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ .PC Free‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ PC Free‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Enter‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ]‪ [Page‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺭﻣﻮﺯًﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ ،[Esc‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺭﺗﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺗﺐ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‬ ‫• \"ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ \"PC Free‬ﺻـ‪113‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ \"USB‬ﺻـ‪31‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺍﻟﻟﺘﻌﺎﺎﻟﻟﻴﻲﺔﺗﻠﻋﻘﻠﺎﺋﻰﻴًﺎ؛ﻧﺤﻗ ٍﻮﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻂﺃ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪114 PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻬﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬

‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪115‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪،[A/V Mute‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ A/V‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﻋﺮﺽ < ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [A/V Mute‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [A/V Mute‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ‬ ‫‪.A/V‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ‪30‬‬ ‫ﺗﺑﻠﺠﻘﺎﻬﺋﺎ ًﻴﺯﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ECO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫{ ‪ < ECO‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻀﺎﺀً ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ،A/V‬ﻭﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"\" ﺻـ‪167‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"‪ \"\"ECO‬ﺻـ‪177‬‬

‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪116‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Freeze‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Freeze‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪b.‬‬

‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪117‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻔﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ + [E-Zoom‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ \"‪ \"+‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪b:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ \"‪ \"+‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ \"‬ ‫‪ \"+‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗُﻄﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ + [E-Zoom‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ]‪ + [E-Zoom‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ‪ 25‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.– [E-Zoom‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Esc‬‬ ‫ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪118‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫• ﻭﻟﻠﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Enter‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ(‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[Esc‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Enter‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻓﻤﺎ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Enter‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ OS X 10.7.x‬ﻓﻤﺎ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB-B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Computer‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪aHDMI1/MHL‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.MHL‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ، USB-B‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪b‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ USB Type B‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Easy Interactive Function‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ USB Display/Easy Interactive Function‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ USB-B‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ )ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.(EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ‪c.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ‪d:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ E-Zoom‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ\" ﺻـ‪117‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ\" ﺻـ‪119‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ]‪ [Page‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗُﻄﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪119‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻀﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ\"\" ﺻـ‪165‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Pointer‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗُﻄﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‪b‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪c.‬‬

‫‪120‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪،(A/V‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻛﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،E-Zoom‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻛﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺭﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪e.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻌﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬

‫‪121‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪f.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪j.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪k.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ 300 × 400‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪l.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪m:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) .[Enter‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‪g‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Enter‬ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪h.[Enter‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ ،[A/V Mute‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ A/V‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ًﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ\" ﺻـ‪115‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ\" ﺻـ‪134‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪i.[Enter‬‬

‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪122‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺴ ﱠﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ‪ E-Zoom‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪f.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪123‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ,‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪123‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ\" ﺻـ‪124‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ < ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻋ ِﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻓًﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ < ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫• \"ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪123‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫• \"ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ\" ﺻـ‪125‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪e.[Enter‬‬ ‫• \"ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ\" ﺻـ‪126‬‬ ‫• \"ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\" ﺻـ‪127‬‬ ‫• \"ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ \"RGBCMY‬ﺻـ‪129‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ,‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺘﻤﺼﻜﺤﻦﻴ ﺗﺢﺤﺍﻟﺪﻳﺴﺪﻄﻣُﻮﻌﻉﺮّﻭﺍﻑﻟﻠﻮﺟﻬﻥﺎﻟﺯﻜﻋﻞﺮ ﺟﺽﻬﺎﻓﺯﺮﻳﻋﺪﺮ ﻟﻜﺽ‪.‬ﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Menu‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪f.‬‬

‫‪124‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ،[ID‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﱢﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪a.[ID‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [ID‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘًﺎ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 0‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ُﻣﻌﺮﱢﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 0‬ﻛ ُﻤﻌ ﱢﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌ ﱢﺮﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪125‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺯﱠﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ،[Menu‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪a.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[Enter‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪e.[Esc‬‬

‫‪126‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪a.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪f.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪g.[Esc‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪k.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪h.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪l.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪i.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪m.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻹﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﺭ‪j‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻼً ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻇﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠ ﱠﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺿﺒﻄﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ‪ < ECO‬ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪127‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ،[Menu‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪a.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷ ﱢﻐﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠ ﱠﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪128‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ،[Menu‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪a.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎ ًﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻭﺻﻮﻻً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪f.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺁﺧ ًﺮﺍ‪g.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪h.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪129‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪RGBCMY‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ﻭ‪) G‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻭ‪) B‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﻭ‪C‬‬ ‫)ﺳﻤﺎﻭﻱ( ﻭ‪) M‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻭ‪) Y‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ RGBCMY‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﱠﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ،[Menu‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪a.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ RGBCMY‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮِ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪e:‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﻕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻸﺧﻀﺮ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻸﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪130‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Menu‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪f.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI3‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪131‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (ELPCB02‬ﻣﻮﺻﱠﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﱠﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI3‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ HDMI2‬ﻭ‪ HDMI3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [HDMI2‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI3‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪132‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ELPCB02‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪e.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ HDMI2‬ﻭ‪ HDMI3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [HDMI2‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Menu‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪f.‬‬

‫‪133‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ \"‪ .\"0000‬ﻏﻴﱢﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Freeze‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺮﻗﺘﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ؛ ﻓﻴﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬٍ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺮﻭﺭ ًﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ \"ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ؟\"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ\" ﺻـ‪133‬‬ ‫• \"ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪135‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ\" ﺻـ‪137‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ,‬ﻭ ُﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳ ًﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ .A/V Mute‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻳﺤﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ\" ﺻـ‪133‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ\" ﺻـ‪134‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪135‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪134‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻻ؛ ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪[Num‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‬ ‫ﺧﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪[Freeze‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ****‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻚ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬٍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ \"ﺗﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ\"‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ,‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎﻧﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪f.‬‬ ‫ﺩ ّﻭﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ‪g.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‪a‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬

‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪135‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘُﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ \"ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍ\"ﻟ ﻟﻄﺎﻤﻗﺪﺔﺓﻣﺧﻦﻤﻣﻨﺲﻔﺬﺩﻗﺍﺎﻟﺋﻜﻖﻬﺮﺗﺑﺎﻘﺀﺮﻳﺛًﺒﺎ‪،‬ﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ,‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ \"ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ \"xxxxx :‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑـ‬ ‫‪ Epson‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ ‪ 30‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ُ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ \"ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻦ‬ ‫\"‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻻﺗﺮﻭﺼﺭﺎ ﺃﻝﺧﺑﺮﺸﻯﺮ‪،‬ﻛﺔﻭﻳﺮ‪n‬ﺟ‪o‬ﻰ‪ s‬ﺍ‪p‬ﻻﺗ‪E‬ﺼﺎﻛﻝﻤﺎﺑـﻫﻮ‪n‬ﻣُ‪o‬ﻮ‪s‬ﺿ‪p‬ﺢ‪E‬ﻓ‪.‬ﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪a‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ُﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫]‪[Num‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻃﻠﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪b‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪136‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪e:[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪f.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪136‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Enter‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺒﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ .‬ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ < ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬

‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪137‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ\"\" ﺻـ‪165‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Kensington Microsaver Security‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ,Microsaver Security System‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪a‬‬ ‫‪.http://www.kensington.com/‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪a‬‬‫ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪139‬‬ ‫• \"ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪142‬‬

‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪139‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﱢﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪a.LAN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪) Epson Projector Software CD-ROM‬ﺇﻥ ُﻭﺟﺪ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪EasyMP Multi‬‬ ‫‪ PC Projection‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪139‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪139‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪ ،(LAN‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ 100Base-TX‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .10Base-T‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒ ًﻼ ﻣﺪﺭﱠﻋًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﻮ ﱢﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﱢﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮ ﱢﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻚ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ LAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬

‫‪140‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Enter‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪f.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪e.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺭﻣﺰًﺍ ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ PJLink‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ PJLink‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ IP‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪g.[Enter‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ Remote‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪h.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪) .‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫‪ ،EPSONREMOTE‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪(.guest‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌ ﱢﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ DHCP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ Web‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺍﻟﺪﺒﻭﻮ ًﻳﺍﺎﺑ‪،‬ﺔﻓﻟﻌﻴﱢﺠﻬﻦﺎﺯﺍ ﺍﻹﻟﻋﻌﺪﺮﺍﺩﺽ‪P‬ﻋﻨﺪ‪ C‬ﺍﻟ‪H‬ﻀﺮ‪D‬ﻭﺭﻋﻠﺓ‪.‬ﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﺖ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪) .‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮ ‪ ،EPSONWEB‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪IP‬ﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ‪(.admin‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺸﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .Epson iProjection‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻈﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪a.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪i.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Epson iProjection to‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪j.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪141‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [LAN‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪k.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪142‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ ،Epson 802.11b/g/n‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺳﻠﻜ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﱢﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪Epson‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻭُﺟﺪ(‬ ‫)ﺇﻥ‬ ‫‪Projector Software CD-ROM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Epson iProjection‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ iOS‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Android‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ Epson iProjection‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ App Store‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ ،Google play‬ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺘﺠﺮ ‪ App Store‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Google play‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪142‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ\" ﺻـ‪143‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ \"Windows‬ﺻـ‪145‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ \"OS X‬ﺻـ‪145‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪145‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ\" ﺻـ‪146‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ \"Windows‬ﺻـ‪147‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻛﱢﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ .Epson 802.11b/g/n‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓُﻚ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪a.‬‬

‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪143‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭ ًﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬

‫‪144‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪e.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Enter‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪g.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪f.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺭﻣ ًﺰﺍ ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺠﺪ ًﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ PJLink‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ PJLink‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪h.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ Remote‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪) .‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،EPSONREMOTE‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪(.guest‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ Web‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪) .‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮ ‪ ،EPSONWEB‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ,‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ‪(.admin‬‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪i.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺸﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .Epson iProjection‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ SSID‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ SSID‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪a.SSID‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪j.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Epson iProjection to‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪DHCP‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪IP‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪145‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )‪ (SSID‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻭ ًﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ DHCP‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺏ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻭﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺮﱢﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ OS X‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪l‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ AirPort‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،AirPort‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )‪ (SSID‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [LAN‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ‪m.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.LAN‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪WPA2-PSK‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪* WPA/WPA2-PSK‬‬ ‫* ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻣُﺰﺩﻭ ًﺟﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬

‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪146‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫• \"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪172‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ,‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Epson‬ﻣﻦ ‪.iProjection‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Epson iProjection‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ V1.3.0‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ \"‪ \"Epson iProjection‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ .،play‬ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ App Store‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Google play‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Epson iProjection‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [LAN‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪e.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪f.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ )‪ ،(QR‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪g‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ،QR‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[Esc‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻣﺨﺘﻔ ًﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Enter‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ iProjection‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Epson‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Epson iProjection‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪c‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ,‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ QR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Contents‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪147‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺯﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ USB‬ﻛﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪i.‬‬ ‫‪ Windows‬ﻭﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ .LAN‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪a.EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [LAN‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺮﱢﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪.IP‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB-A‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﺑﻼﻏﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪f.USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪g.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows Vista‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ MPPLaunch.exe‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪.AutoPlay‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪h.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Windows Firewall‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺜﺒﱠﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ MPPLaunch.exe‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.USB‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ُﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍ ّﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"‪ \"EasyMP Monitor‬ﺻـ‪149‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ\" ﺻـ‪150‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪152‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ \"SNMP‬ﺻـ‪153‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ \"ESC/VP21‬ﺻـ‪154‬‬ ‫• \"ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ \"PJLink‬ﺻـ‪156‬‬ ‫• \"ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ \"Crestron RoomView‬ﺻـ‪157‬‬

‫‪149 EasyMP Monitor‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EasyMP Monitor‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ EasyMP Monitor‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ EasyMP Monitor‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://www.epson.com/‬‬

‫‪150‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Internet Explorer 9.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫• ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)‪ (Windows‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﻱ )‪ (OS X‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫• ‪Easy Interactive Function‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ECO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫• ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪USB Type B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪a.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫• ‪Event ID‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Epson Web Control‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪d‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺭﻣﺰًﺍ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤ ًﻴﺎ(‬ ‫• ‪ -‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪) HTTP‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ \"ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ\" ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪) 80‬ﺇﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪,‬‬ ‫‪,10001 ,10000 ,5357 ,4649 ,4352 ,3629 ,3625 ,3621 ,3620 ,843‬‬ ‫‪(41794‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪g‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪.Web‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ‪e‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻚ‪) .‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ .Web‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮ ‪ EPSONREMOTE‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪(.guest‬‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻚ‪) .‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫‪ EPSONWEB‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪(.admin‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ Remote‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ < ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪Remote‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ Web‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ < ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪Web‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪f‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬